Dodge | Ram Gas | Owner`s manual | Dodge Ram Gas Owner`s manual

Dodge Ram Gas Owner`s manual
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. See
the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . .19
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Occupant Restraints
(1500 Standard And Quad Cab Only) . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Remote Starting System — (Gas Engine Only) . . .24
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .42
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Power Windows—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .47
11
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .85
䡵 Occupant Restraints
(2500/3500/Mega Cab Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .81
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 112
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Switch Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
13
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Transmission—If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the key.
Ignition Switch Positions
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
15
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ON positions, and the
brake pedal is depressed.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
Replacement Keys
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed and
needs to be cut.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light
will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the second key.
17
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft
Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again
for 3 seconds, and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry
key, contact your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System:
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The
door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only
available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is started
with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unprogrammed
Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine will run for
2 seconds and then the security alarm will be initiated. To
exit alarming mode, press the transmitter Unlock button, or
start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
Three Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Release both buttons at the same time.
5. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the UNLOCK button.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
21
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security
system on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Transmitter Battery Service
1. With transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade
or dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Be careful not to
disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Install the
batteries with the positive terminal up, reference the note
⬙+ SIDE UP⬙ on the inside of the bottom half of the
transmitter case. Avoid touching the new batteries with
your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If
you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is a 3V lithium
2016 cell. This transmitter requires two batteries.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — (GAS ENGINE
ONLY)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the
vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is
part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, and all the
doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START
button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To
indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly.
Remote Start Transmitter
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
START button once.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position,
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of park.
• The brake pedal is pressed.
25
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but cancelled before the engine begins to crank. After
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.
The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate
that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is
running. The lamps will turn off when the ignition is
turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock
plunger up or down.
All doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before
closing will remain locked when closed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
27
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Automatic Door Locks – If Equipped
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
Automatic Door Lock Programming
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times; ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed).
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped
Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable
the Auto Unlock Feature:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
29
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the childprotection door lock system.
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door, insert the tip of
the ignition key or alike object into the lock control lever,
slide the lever UP to engage the locks and DOWN to
disengage the child-protection locks. When the system on
a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows—If Equipped
31
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Mega Cab
models. The windows will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or ACC (Accessory) position
and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or the
driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power windows to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned off.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (1500 STANDARD and
QUAD CAB ONLY)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
33
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
1 — Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
37
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
39
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
WARNING!
Detaching Buckle With Key
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
2
Inserting Latch Plate
In Use Position
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
43
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
if the ignition is cycled, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
45
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbags
47
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the window bag. The area
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of
the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
4. If your vehicle has window bags, do not lean against
the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section later in this
owner’s manual.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has window bags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Air Bag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Window Bags above Side Windows (If Equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Driver Seat Track Position Sensor (If Equipped)
• Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
• Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
How the Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect roll over.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
51
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning
light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
in this section for additional information.
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(If Equipped) (an amber light located in the center of
the instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off.
The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS
AIR BAG OFF⬙ to show that the passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbags. The
PAD light will illuminate when the passenger frontal
airbag has been turned off by using the manual on/off
switch (standard cab models only). See Passenger
Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
(with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
53
the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of
the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force
to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the
window bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2 inches (9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
• is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
• is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
• has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
WARNING!
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there
to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps
or running boards.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The
airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or
locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself.
Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag
system.
57
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see the following list) in the event data
recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment.
Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction
with other data gathered during a complete accident
investigation, the electronic data may be used by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
involving
a
59
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Seatbelt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
4. Otherwise required by law
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
61
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
63
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
in this section).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Standard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
65
2
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
67
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab models have three anchorages, one
behind each of the rear seats.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence (Quad Cab Rear Seats)
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
2
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (2500/3500/MEGA CAB
ONLY)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
73
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
75
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
1 — Latch Plate
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
77
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
2
78
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
79
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
2
Detaching Buckle with Key
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Inserting Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
81
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
In Use Position
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
82
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
83
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
WARNING!
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
2
84
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the ignition is cycled, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for
more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
85
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
2
86
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations
that allow less forceful deployments.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver and passengers in the first and second
row sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped
with window bags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the airbags
and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. These protective covers for the airbag cushions
are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as trailer
brake controllers, snowplow controllers, auxiliary light
switches, radios, etc. on or behind the knee bolster. Knee
bolsters are designed to work with the air bag and seat belt
to protect you. Mounting any additional equipment on or
behind the knee bolster can cause injury during a crash.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location
of the window bag. The area where the window bag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not have
any accessory items installed which will alter the roof,
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
87
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
2
88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
• Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
a rear seat, if available.
• Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. See the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
• If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
• Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
• All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
• The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has window airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
89
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Crash Sensor
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
2
90
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Window Airbag System, on vehicles equipped,
consists of the following:
• AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Window Bags Above the Side Windows.
• Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Side impact sensors
• Interconnecting Wiring
How The Airbag System Works
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate.
• The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or
rear collisions.
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column. If the key is in the ⬙Off⬙ position, in
the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate
• The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
• If it detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously. The instrument cluster will flash the seat belt indicator if it
detects a fault with the airbag indicator.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked
right away.
• When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
91
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag deflates
through vents towards the instrument panel. The
passenger’s front airbag is deflated through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do
not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
2
92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
• is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
• is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
• has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
93
WARNING!
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, and then immediately to deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
2
94
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Airbags Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—If Equipped
The window airbag control module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The window airbag control module will not
detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
The airbag control module monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition
switch is in the ⬙START⬙ or ⬙RUN⬙ positions. These
include all of the items listed above. The airbag control
module also turns on the AIRBAG light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on as a diagnostic or system check, then turns the light
off. If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously.
The side (window) impact SRS Airbags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the airbag
control module detects a collision requiring the window
95
bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of
the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and covers
the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds
(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to
children. The window bag is only about 3 1⁄2 inches (8.9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
2
96
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured because the airbags are not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see the following list) in the event data
recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment.
Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction
with other data gathered during a complete accident
investigation, the electronic data may be used by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
97
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
2
98
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
2. Used in defense of litigation
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
involving
a
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Seatbelt status
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
4. Otherwise required by law
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Cruise control status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
99
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
2
100
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
101
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
2
102
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that
it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
103
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
in this section).
2
104
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Identification dots are located above the standard cab
front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower
anchors.
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Standard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
105
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Mega Cab Rear Seats
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
2
106
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
107
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab and Mega Cab models have three
anchorages, one behind each of the rear seats.
2
108
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
109
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence (Quad Cab Rear Seats)
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2
110
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
111
Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating
Positions (Mega Cab)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
112
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality, energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with the anticipated climatic conditions under which vehicle operation will
occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
discussed in Section 7 under Maintenance Procedures,
Engine Oil.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
113
CAUTION!
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
• Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped . . . 122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 123
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 124
3
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Reclining Seats
(1500 Standard And Quad Cab Models) . . . . . 150
▫ Reclining Seats
(2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Power Seats (1500 Standard And Quad Cab
Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Power Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models . . . . . 156
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 166
▫ Daytime Running Lights
(Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . 174
▫ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 175
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
䡵 Overhead Console— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
117
䡵 Overhead Console With Compass/Temperature
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Recalibrating The Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 190
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 192
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Open Sunroof - Express Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders
(40–20–40 Seats) — Automatic Transmission . . 199
▫ Comfort Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders
(Bucket Seats) — Automatic Transmission . . . . 201
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
119
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And
Heated Side View Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . 209
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped . . . 209
▫ Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped . . . . . . . . 210
䡵 Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 210
䡵 Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Storage And Seats (Quad Cab Models) . . . . . . 206
䡵 Easy-Off Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Storage And Seats (Mega Cab Models) . . . . . . 207
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Mega Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
MIRRORS
Inside Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
3
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
123
Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on your right side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex right side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All 6 x 9 inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
3
Power Mirror Movement
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the rear window
defroster or the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear
Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature.
These features also turn off after activation, when 15
minutes have elapsed. To reactivate, simply press the
button again.
Power Mirror Switches
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
3
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
3
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
129
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
131
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
133
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
135
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up
SEATS
The seating options available in this truck are the result of
extensive customer research and evaluations.
Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
(protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
40-20-40 Front Seat
149
Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward
or rearward and is equipped with a back recliner. The
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is
found at the front edge of each seat cushion. Pull up on
the handle and slide the seat to get the most comfortable
position.
WARNING!
Manual Seat Adjuster
As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.
The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment (if equipped).
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Seats (1500 Standard and Quad Cab
Models)
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Seat Recliner Handle
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models)
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Manual Recline Lever
151
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on
the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then
push down on the head restraint.
Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the
driver’s seatback and on the right side of the passenger’s
seatback increases or decreases the lumbar (lower back)
support.
Head Restraints
Manual Lumbar Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
Power Seats (1500 Standard and Quad Cab
Models) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
3
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Switch
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. One switch controls the seat movement. The six-way switch can be moved forward or backwards to get the most comfortable position. The same
switch can be moved up and down to control seat height or
to change the seat angle by tilting it up or down.
Power Seat Switch Position
Power Seats (2500/3500/Mega Cab Models) — If
Equipped
CAUTION!
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls or the Occupant Classification System.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
3
Power Seat Switch
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat movement. The four-way switch in the center can be moved
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable position. The same switch can be moved up and down to
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Rear Seat Features — Mega Cab Models
Reclining Rear Seats — Mega Cab Models
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
and adjust for comfort.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Tilt Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seat backs can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold either rear seat back down (Table Mode), lift the
handle and fold the seat back forward. Simply lift the seat
back to return the seat to the upright position. Verify that
it is locked in place.
3
Table Mode Handle
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
backs provide 2 D-rings and each of the rear storage bin
lids provide 2 slotted cutouts. Use a cargo tie down to
secure cargo in the cargo carrying area.
Table Mode
Folding Rear Seat (Kneel Mode) — Mega Cab
Models
Both the left and right rear seats can be folded flat (Kneel
Mode) and used for carrying cargo. Each of the rear seat
Securing Cargo
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle, causing serious injury or possible death.
Secure cargo with a cargo tie down using the
D-Rings provided on the back of the seats and the
slotted cutouts in the rear storage bin lid.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear seat will drop and move forward in
Kneel Mode.
To fold either rear seat flat (Kneel Mode), lift the handle
and fold the seat forward. Simply lift the seat back to
return the seat to the upright position. Verify that it is
locked in place.
Kneel Mode
Kneel Mode Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
3
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located in the instrument
panel under the climate controls.
Heated Seat Switches
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain High heat level, then
press the switch again to obtain Low heat level. Pressing
the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF. If
you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF, the seat
heating level will automatically change to the next lower
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
level, or OFF. The High heat level operates for 30 minutes
(approximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 minutes (approximate). The seat heat will also turn OFF
when the ignition is turned OFF. Both of the indicators
ON identifies High heat level. The lower indicator On
only, identifies Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights
on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat System needs
servicing.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
163
released you must reach into the opening beneath the
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the
safety catch before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Hood Release Lever
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is
Secondary Latch
3
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
LIGHTS
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
Headlight Switch Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Interior Lights
Dimmer Control
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
Club Cab/Quad Cab models may have an optional
switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
the lens.
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Headlamp Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
the headlamp switch is cycled off. Headlamp delay can
be cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON
then OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Light Switch Rotation
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only and Fleet
Vehicles)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights
will turn off.
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position,
or the high beam is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Cargo Light Switch
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the
CARGO button. The interior lights will also turn on
when the cargo lights are on. The cargo lights will also
turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed,
as part of the illuminated entry feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
Multifunction Control Lever
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
3
Turn Signal Lever
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
turn off.
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
High Beam / Low Beam
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
171
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LOW continual speed position. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Switch
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
3
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly
in place.
Tilt Steering Control Lever
173
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
Adjustment
1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts.
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, in the
direction you desire to move the pedals.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.
3
Speed Control Switches
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific
engine).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
increases so that tapping the button three times will
increase speed by three increments.
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
your specific engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
Functions
Engage Speed
Minimun RESUME Speed
ACCEL Increase
DECEL Decrease
Dropout Speed
3.7L
35 mph (56 km/h)
30 mph (50 km/h)
2 mph (3km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
30 mph (50 km/h)
177
4.7L
35 mph (56 km/h)
30 mph (50 km/h)
2 mph (3km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
30 mph (50 km/h)
5.7L
25 mph (40 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this happens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a 5–speed-manual transmission
should be operated in 4th gear or lower under the above
conditions.
Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to use either
TOW HAUL or O/D OFF modes which can be selected
by pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button located
at the end of the gear shifter.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE— IF EQUIPPED
The two optional overhead consoles may consist of the
following features:
179
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
In the middle of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
Overhead Console Features
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
— If Equipped
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
— IF EQUIPPED
This optional overhead console consists of the following:
This overhead console allows you to choose between a
compass/temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored.
US/M Button
• Courtesy Lights
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RESET Button
181
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds
while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the Global Reset will reset all 3 displays.
Step Button
Use this button to reset the following displays:
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Trip Odometer (ODO)
Elapsed time (ET)
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
3
182
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momentarily blank. Then, the history information will be erased,
and the averaging will continue from where it was before
the reset. The reset value is based on a minimal amount
of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous
drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this
value to change dependent upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to an
alternating test display of “LO” and “FUEL”. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LO FUEL” text and a new DTE value will be
displayed, based on the current values in the DTE
calculation and the current fuel tank level.
NOTE: It is possible for DTE to display “LO FUEL”
before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instrument cluster. This could occur because low fuel warning
is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an
estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy
and remaining fuel tank volume.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
183
C/T Button
• 26 gallons - 1500 short box models
• 34 gallons - 1500 Quad Cab (if equipped)/2500/3500
short box models
3
• 35 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 long box models
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer
to change to Zero.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to Zero.
Use this button to select a readout of the outside temperature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing up to three 360° turns, with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manually calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
Recalibrating The Compass
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL symbol is displayed complete one 360° turn in an area free
from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL symbol
will turn off and the compass will function normally.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
3
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The default for the compass variance is zone 8.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located underhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
WARNING!
HomeLink威 Programming Buttons
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section.
Outer HomeLink buttons
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgrammingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
191
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that there
are still programming difficulties or questions, contact
HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
NOTE: The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow
the power sunroof to operate for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned off.
193
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Open Sunroof - Express Mode
Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate
the Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically. During the Express Open operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will
remain in a partial open position. Again, momentarily
pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express
Open Feature.
Comfort Stop
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate “Comfort
Stop” position. This is the first stop that express open
reaches. This is designed to reduce wind buffeting at
vehicle speeds between 20 - 40 mph (32 - 64 km/h).
Pressing the switch momentarily rearward again will
open the sunroof to its full open position however wind
buffeting can occur at full open.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
195
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in
cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The outlet is located in the instrument
panel below and to the right of the Climate Control
Panel. A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating
“Power Outlet” 12V-20A.
There is an additional Power Outlet inside the center
console of vehicles equipped with 40/20/40, or Bucket
front seats. There is also a Power Outlet located on the
rear of the center console for Quad Cab or Mega Cab
vehicles (only) equipped with bucket seats.
The outlet(s) has/have a fused direct feed from the
battery so it/they receive power whether the ignition is
ON or OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
All accessories connected to this/these outlet(s) should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the ON position only.
197
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER
The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument
panel cup holder tray.
The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel,
above and to the left of the ash receiver.
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Ash Tray Automatic Transmission
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
Your new Ram truck is equipped with two adjustable
cupholders. The cupholder is opened by pulling on the
cup holder door handle, on the front surface. Each
opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups
and mugs of various sizes.
Ash Tray Manual Transmission
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To secure the cup, place the cup to be held into one of the
cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the
cup until it is held stable.
Cup Holders Automatic Transmission
Cup Holder Door Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
If your new Ram truck is equipped with bucket seats
there are three cup holders located on the front of the
center console.
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual
Transmission
3
Cup Holders Manual Transmission
Cup Holders Bucket Seat
201
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab — If Equipped
Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger
convenience.
Rear Cupholder — Mega Cab
Mega Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
Mega Cab Rear Armrest Cup Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
If Equipped
203
removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to
configure the storage area into compartments. For example, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top
computer, a cellular telephone, CD’s and miscellaneous
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm
surface to serve as a desktop for your “mobile office.”
WARNING!
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
3
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats)— If
Equipped
Center Storage Compartment
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is a power outlet (if equipped), a
cut out for a cell phone charger cord, removable coin
holder (if equipped), and a divider to configure the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
storage area into separate compartments. Lift the lower
handle on the front of the armrest, and raise the armrest
for access to the lower storage bin. On Quad Cab and
Mega Cab models the rear of the floor console offers a
power outlet, a tip out bin and a rear air duct (Mega Cab
Only).
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
205
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage and Seats (Quad Cab Models)
Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion
there is a storage compartment.
Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.
The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compartment.
Quad Cab Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
207
Storage and Seats (Mega Cab Models)
The Mega Cab models provide additional storage behind
the rear seat.
To gain access to the Mega Cab rear storage, fold the rear
seats to the “kneel position”. (See page 158 for more
information.)
3
Push down on the front of the storage compartment
handle and lift the storage compartment cover.
Mega Cab Rear Storage Compartment Handle
208
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear storage compartment can be divided into three
separate compartments by using the divider doors inside
the storage compartment.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Mega Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Mega Cab Rear Storage Dividers
Grocery Bag Hooks
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
209
Power Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side
view Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
3
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat, may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
Quad Cab Rear 60/40 Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
3
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
213
PICKUP BOX
3
Load Floor Securing Straps
Pickup Box Features
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
The pickup box on your new Ram has many features
designed for utility and convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the
pickup box, you must use Mopar威 toolbox brackets
available from your dealer.
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
across the box in the indentations provided above the
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the
floor.
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the
cargo and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450
kg) total.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading” document available from your dealer. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.
215
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Light) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. If the truck is a 3500
dual rear wheel model, unplug the tailgate wire harness
from under the rear of the truck and pull the harness out
of the cargo box access hole. Unlatch the tailgate and
remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang
from the pivot, then rotate and pull away from the box.
Once the cables are free, move to the right side of the
tailgate hinge bracket.
Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to
the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate
from the vehicle entirely. Do not carry the tailgate loose in
the truck pickup box.
3
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly
spaced rear clearance lights. If such a vehicle is operated
without a tailgate, suitable lights must be installed.
TAILGATE SUPPORT STRAP ATTACHMEN
TAILGATE OPEN
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
217
WARNING!
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed.
3
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless.
To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions should be observed:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust
your climate control system to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.
• The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If
there are any question regarding the operation of your
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the
belt.
219
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
seatbelt light will flash.
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
3
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 238
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 246
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 258
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities . . . . 260
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 260
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 265
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Operation Instructions (CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Audio Play) . . 272
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 And WMA Play) . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD
(6–Disc) Radio With Navigation System . . . . . . . 274
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ,
And RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 278
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Heater Only — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 280
▫ Air Conditioning And Heating —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Check Gages
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions
above for each indicated problem.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch
to ON to obtain accurate readings.
2. Voltage Gauge
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
227
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical system should be serviced.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound. The “Check Gages”
indicator may also illuminate prior to the voltage gauge
moving out of normal range. In either case, see you local
authorized Dealer for system service.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn
signals are operating.
4. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
5. Airbag Indicator Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag
system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information. (See page 33 for more
information.)
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour.
9. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading, under normal driving conditions,
may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service should be obtained. (See page 454 for more
information.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
10. Transfer Case Position
(See page 316 for more information.)
11. TOW HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW
HAUL OD/OFF button is pushed once. (See page 311 for
more information.)
12. OD/OFF
the OD/OFF button is located at the end of the gear shift
lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL
OD/OFF button is pushed twice. (See page 311 for more
information.)
229
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
trailer. If the needle rises to the “245°F” mark, stop the
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and
allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See
Cooling System information in the section on “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve
engine cooling.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
14. Security Light
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about two seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON.
15. Transmission Range Indicator (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
When the gear selector lever is moved, this indicator
shows the automatic transmission gear range selected.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
If the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display may also display GASCAP, which indicates
that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged.
The Vacuum Fluorescent Display will also display NOFUSE, which indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from
the Integrated Power Module.
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours perform the following: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the
engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip
button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will
change to trip value first, then it will display the engine
hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a
period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the
engine is started.
231
17. Check Gages Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
18. Brake System Warning Light
This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the
parking brake has not been released. This light will
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is
released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until
the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a
period of time may result in the red brake light illuminating and a brake switch code being set on ABS
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should
extinguish the red brake light.
19. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. See your authorized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated
until the brake pedal is pressed.
20. Cargo Light
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
Lamp is activated by pressing the Cargo Light Button on
the headlight switch.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
233
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
22. SERV 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the
4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric
shift 4WD systems. The SERV 4WD indicator monitors
the electric shift 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. ESP/BAS Warning Lamp – If Equipped
The lamp indicates a problem with one or more
of the functions of ESP. The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” in the instrument cluster
comes on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position as a bulb check. It should go out with
the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESP system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30
mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. NOTE: • ⬙The ⬙ESP/BAS Warning Lamp⬙ come
on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
ON. • The ESP Control System will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is actively operating.
25. Low Washer Fluid Light
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/4 full. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.
26. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This lamp indicates the ESP system is active
when it is flashing or that a part, or all, of the
features of the ESP system are not able to
function when it is on solid. The yellow “ESP
Indicator Light” located in the tachometer area. The
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
235
TCS Indicator Light” becomes illuminated when the
ESP-Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially
available.
29. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON position.
27. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g. snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
30. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level drops to 1/16 tank, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
(See page 182 for more information.)
28. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
• 26 gallons - 1500 short box models
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead
console module (CMTC), it is possible for DTE to display
“LO FUEL” before the low fuel warning light turns on in
the instrument cluster. This could occur because the low
fuel warning is set to a specified fuel tank volume and
DTE is an estimated distance calculation based on vehicle
fuel economy and remaining fuel tank volume.
• 34 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 short box models
• 35 gallons - 1500/2500/3500 long box models
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31. Door Ajar
The door ajar light will illuminate when any door is
opened. When the ignition is ON the door ajar light will
stay illuminated until the open door is closed. When the
ignition is OFF the door ajar light will stay illuminated
until the open door is closed or the battery saver feature
automatically turns the light off.
32. CRUISE Light
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
237
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
REF Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
239
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
241
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
245
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
247
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
249
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
251
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
CAUTION!
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
253
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
255
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
257
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
259
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAK Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
261
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock Setting Procedure
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
263
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
Program Type
No program type or undefined
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic Rock
Adult Hits
Soft Rock
Top 40
16 Digit-Character Display
None
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic_Rock
Adult_Hits
Soft_Rock
Top_40
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm and Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Foreign Language
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Personality
Public
College
Unassigned
Weather
Country
Oldies
Soft
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft_R_&_B
Foreign_Language
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Personality
Public
College
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
265
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disengage and eject from the radio.
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
267
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
269
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
271
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
REC Radio
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Setting the Clock” under ”System Settings” in
your Navigation User’s Manual for details about setting
the clock.
275
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The system is located in the headliner behind the
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Activation
NOTE: Your vehicle’s radio must be on and in satellite
mode when the activation process takes place.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
pushed.
ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
screen.
277
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK
Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button, while
performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
279
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the
right hand control will allow you to change the mode.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
281
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
283
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
4
Climate Control Location
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Heater Only — If Equipped
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Manual Heating Controls
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke or
odors. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Air flows through the panel only or
through both the panel and floor vents
depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
285
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left position.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning and Heating — If Equipped
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Air Conditioning And Heating
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan
control at any speed and press the snowflake
button located at the right of the control panel.
Conditioned air will be directed through the
outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel only or through
both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculation Mode” mode does not
necessarily consume more fuel than normal A/C mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
287
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets, and the air conditioning
may be on.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel, and the air
conditioning may be on.
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left position.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also provide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use. To
remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the
full defrost mode.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
289
Air Conditioning and Heating Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located on the
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off.
A/C Pushbutton
Dual Zone Control Head
With the fan control in the ON position, pushing the A/C button turns on
the air conditioning compressor. An
indicator light on the button shows
that the Air Conditioning compressor
is on. Conditioned air is now directed
through the mode outlets selected.
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor
OFF.
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Pushbutton
Pushing the Recirculation button allows interior air to recirculate continuously in any position except defrost
and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool
down of the interior. See “Fast
Cooldown” later in this section.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Heat
Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mix
291
Blower Control
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left position.
4
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Zone Temperature Control
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished
by having separate temperature control slides for both
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also provide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
293
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
The rear air duct is designed to be pointed up when in
A/C mode, and pointed down in Heat mode.
Rear Air Duct—Mega Cab Only
Operating Tips
Mega Cab Rear Air Duct
The rear seat will receive air flow in all modes except for
Defrost.
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and press the Recirculation
push-button. When a comfortable condition has been
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control slide and blower speed as necessary to
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
maintain comfort.
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the
idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at
elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
295
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures – Gas Engines . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Manual Transmission — 6 Speed (G56) . . . . . . 313
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Manual Transmission — 6-Speed (G238) . . . . . 314
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Downshifting – All Manual Transmissions . . . . 315
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Four-Wheel- Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . 316
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive . . . . . 307
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Transfer Case Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (5 Position Switch)—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System —
RWAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch)—
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System
(ABS/TCS/BAS/Hsa/ERM/ESP) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) –
If Equipped With ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Hsa (Hill Start Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 352
䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
299
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 387
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Adding Fuel (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Flexible Fuel— (Fleet Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
STARTING AND OPERATING
301
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Methods For Removing Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 404
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 410
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive Models . 410
▫ Dodge Ram 1500 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive Models . 410
▫ Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Snowplow Model Prep Package Availability . . 407
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES – GAS ENGINES
The starter should not be operated for more than 15second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
unless the clutch is fully depressed.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running.
5
Ignition Key Positions
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
305
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive
The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
307
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel-drive vehicles be
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving, with
the transmission in neutral (N) position, can cause severe
damage to the transmission.
“D” Drive
This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd
gear direct and 4th and 5th (if equipped) gear overdrive
(see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city
and highway driving.
“2” Second
Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or
on mountain roads where more precise speed control is
desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and for
engine braking when descending moderately steep grades.
309
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
“1” First
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or less)
when going downhill.
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
• the transmission selector is in Drive;
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
• the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” switch has not been
activated;
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”
Modes
Tow Haul O/D Off Switch
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button once to
select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and
311
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
“TOW HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if equipped) is disabled
and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are modified. Shifts into
Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed during steady cruise
(for improved fuel economy) and automatic closedthrottle downshifts to 3rd gear are performed (for improved braking) when driving conditions warrant. Pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button a second time to
select O/D OFF will disable 4th and 5th gear completely,
which should eliminate any excessive transmission shifting.
The “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has
been activated. Pressing the switch a third time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF”
modes are desired, the button must be pressed each time
the engine is started.
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Truck models with manual transmission are equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch
pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
straight across and back into Reverse.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on
the clutch.
313
Manual Transmission — 6 Speed (G56)
2500 and 3500 models are equipped with the G56 manual
transmission. This transmission has a “creeper” 1st gear
which should be used to start from a standing position
when carrying a payload or towing a trailer. Damage to
the clutch can result from starting in 2nd or 3rd gear with
a loaded vehicle. An unloaded vehicle may be launched
in 2nd gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do not
skip a gear.
For most city driving you may find it easier to use only
1st through 5th gear ranges. For steady highway driving
with light accelerations, 6th gear is recommended. To
shift into 5th gear, move the shift lever to the right
beyond the spring pressure point and push it forward.
When shifting from 5th to 4th gear, pull the lever down
toward you in one motion. Do not pull the lever sharply
left as you may shift accidentally into 2nd gear and
damage the transmission.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.
Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight
across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse.
Manual Transmission — 6-Speed (G238)
1500 models are equipped with a G238 manual transmission. This transmission has a clutch interlocking ignition
system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start
the vehicle.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts
during cruise conditions (steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged.
6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in mph
(km//h)
En- Model Axle Mode 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to
gine
2
3
4
5
6
Accel
15
25
40
45
50
5.7L 2500/ ALL
&
3500
Cruise (24) (40) (65) (72) (81)
For improved clutch life, all six forward gears should be
used. For steady highway driving with light acceleration,
6th gear is recommended. When shifting from 5th to 6th
gear, do not apply excessive knob load toward the
Reverse gear gate, as you may overpower the Reverse
“crash-through” load and unintentionally clash into Reverse gear. Also, when shifting from 6th to 5th gear,
excessive knob load toward the Reverse gear gate will
result in blocking of the shift.
STARTING AND OPERATING
You should use first gear when starting from a standing
position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in
2nd or 3rd gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do
not skip a gear.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.
Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight
across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
315
6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speed in mph (km/h)
Accel- 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to
En- Model Axle eration
gine
2
3
4
5
6
Rate
3.7L
1500
4.7L
1500
15
AC(24)
ALL CEL & 10
CRUISE (16)
AC15
ALL CEL & (24)
CRUISE
24
(39)
19
(31)
34
(55)
27
(44)
47
(76)
37
(60)
56
(90)
41
(66)
25
(40)
40
(65)
45
(72)
50
(81)
Downshifting – All Manual Transmissions
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. For acceleration at speeds less than 20 mph (30
km/h), 2nd gear is recommended.
5
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause valve damage.
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and / or
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is
depressed.
To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting
Speed chart.
Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds
Gear
Selection
Maximum
Speed
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
20 mph 35 mph 55 mph 75 mph 85 mph
(32
(56
(88
(120
(135
km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
FOUR-WHEEL- DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel-Drive Dodge Ram Trucks are equipped with
either a Manually Shifted transfer case or an Electronically Shifted transfer case. See the operating instructions
for your transfer case, located within this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The transfer case provides 4 mode positions - 2 (rear)wheel-drive high range, 4-wheel-drive high range, neutral, and 4-wheel-drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheeldrive position (2H) for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
317
The 4-wheel-drive light (4WD), located in the instrument
cluster, alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4-wheel
drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. This light illuminates when the transfer case is
shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions. There is no light
for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
cause damage to the transfer case.
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
STARTING AND OPERATING
4H
4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
319
Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information.
4L
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel-drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
5
Manual Transfer Case Shifter
2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.
Transfer Case Reminder Light
The four-wheel-drive operating light (4WD), located in
the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the
front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (5 Position Switch)—If
Equipped
321
This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 5 mode
positions: 2 wheel drive (2WD), 4WD AUTO, 4WD HI,
Neutral and 4WD Lo.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) or 4 wheel
drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the
vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits,
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
5 Position Switch
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four wheel
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD HI and 4WD LO positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position - see Shifting Procedure section for
specific shifting instructions. The 4WD HI and 4WD LO
positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD HI and 4WD LO positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
Neutral Button
STARTING AND OPERATING
323
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational towing
only. See the Recreational Towing section for specific
procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral (N).
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LO, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD HI positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
325
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD AUTO
Automatic 4–wheel drive sends power to the rear wheels.
4–wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the
vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for
varying road conditions.
4WD HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information.
5 Position Switch
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
STARTING AND OPERATING
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
2WD ⇔ 4 AUTO or 4 HI
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD HI can be
done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
327
stopped, the ignition key must be in the ON position with
the engine either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be
completed if the key is in the accessory position.
2WD or 4 AUTO or 4 HI ⇔ 4 LO
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch on manual transmissions).
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
in process then the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch)—If
Equipped
329
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 4 mode
positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive
high range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
Transfer Case Switch
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4HI and 4LO positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired
position - see Shifting Procedure section for specific
shifting instructions. The 4HI and 4LO positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
in the 4HI and 4LO positions on dry hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational
towing only. See the Recreational Towing section for
specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral
(N).
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
Neutral Button
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
STARTING AND OPERATING
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
331
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the ⴖService 4WDⴖ light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4LO, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4HI
positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
STARTING AND OPERATING
4HI
4 Wheel Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
333
Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case
4LO
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information.
5
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning
the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition
key must be in the ON position with the engine either
RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the
key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4HI if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning
(no traction). In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator
light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop
spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD⇔ 4HI
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4HI can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you
2WD or 4HI ⇔ 4LO
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4LO some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
STARTING AND OPERATING
335
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch on manual transmissions).
Preferred Procedure
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is
ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL, or
diagonally across the hill.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After off-road usage, particularly in sand or
mud, inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumulated dirt at the propeller shaft, axles, U-joints, brake
rotors and calipers.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud.
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Check the exhaust system and all exposed components
for any sign of damage.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,
slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance. Removing the foreign material from
the wheels will correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
339
WARNING!
Parking Brake Release
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or First gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving, failure to do so can lead to brake problems
due to excessive heating of the rear brakes.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if
equipped) during brake use.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydroboost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering oil reaches
operating temperature.
Brake Noise
During normal operation of the brake system certain
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional
⬙groan⬙ or ⬙squeal⬙ noises may occur during normal
operation of the brake system which may not be indicative of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture,
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may
STARTING AND OPERATING
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or continuous noises during braking may be an indication that
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.
Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — RWAL
The Anti-lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically controls the operation of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
The system remains operational in the four-wheel drive
mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
front brakes are locked up. This may cause the rear
brakes to lockup through the drivetrain, which may
reduce the effectiveness of the Anti-lock Brake System.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
341
WARNING!
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System — If
Equipped
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system and is normal.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light
The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning
light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake
System is not functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes.
WARNING!
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
343
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
(ABS/TCS/BAS/HSA/ERM/ESP) – IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS
(Anti-Lock Brake System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake Assist System), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) and ESP (Electronic
Stability Program). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESP.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
STARTING AND OPERATING
345
WARNING!
TCS (Traction Control System) – if equipped with
ESP
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” modes. Refer to “ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)” in this Section of this
manual.
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ESP Off Button Location
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
347
HSA (Hill Start Assist)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle
applied.
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the clutch pedal (manual vehicles only) remains
depressed during the application of the throttle, the
HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle will roll
down the incline. This could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply
throttle while depressing the clutch pedal until you
are ready to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped
• Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in reverse gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in drive (automatic equipped vehicle), and the activation
criteria are met, HSA will activate.
STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA on Automatic Vehicles
The system will work in reverse and all forward gears on
vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in neutral.
HSA on Manual Vehicles
The system will work in reverse, forward gears, and
neutral on manual transmission equipped vehicles. The
system does not recognize neutral on manual vehicles,
thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short
period while in neutral, regardless of clutch position. To
prevent this, do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by
putting the transmission in neutral and letting gravity act
on the vehicle, as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from
rolling. Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in
the desired direction.
349
Towing and Hauling with HSA (Vehicles Equipped
with Automatic Transmissions Only)
The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer, unless the “TOW/HAUL” button,
located on the transmission gear selector lever, is selected. When activated, the “TOW/HAUL” light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster. Refer to the “Starting
and Operating” Section of this manual for more information on the “TOW/HAUL” mode. In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling
conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes when the Tow/Haul
button is activated and compensates by releasing brake
pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied to in
order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill.
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, when the brake pedal is
released there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object
behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in park or
using the parking brake, it will roll down the incline
and could cause a collision with another vehicle or
object. Always remember to use the parking brake
while parking on a hill, and that the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in Park (automatic transmission) or Neutral with clutch out (manual
transmission) with wheels straight. Apply parking brake
on manual transmission vehicle.
2. Start the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the
clutch out, rotate the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center.
4. Press ESP button four times within twenty seconds.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” should appear and disappear four times.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clockwise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm
HSA is off.
Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off
HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.
351
ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM can not
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
353
WARNING!
• ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESP system has multiple operating modes depending on vehicle type – Two Wheel Drive (2WD) or Four
Wheel Drive (4WD). 4WD vehicles may be equipped
with either a four mode position (2WD/Neutral/4HI/
4LO) transfer case or a five mode position (2WD/Auto/
Neutral/4H/4LO) transfer case. If you have a 4WD
vehicle, refer to the Four Wheel Drive Operating Section
to determine which transfer case is on your vehicle and
how to operate it.
All 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2WD, Auto
or 4HI Modes can choose the following ESP
operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD/
Auto/4HI Modes and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the
vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4LO or neutral back to 4HI or Auto, the ESP
system will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for almost all driving situations. ESP should only be
turned to “Partial Off” or “ESP Off” for specific reasons
as noted below.
This mode is entered by momentarily
depressing the “ESP Control Switch”.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the “limited
slip” feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other features of ESP function normally, with
the exception of engine power reduction. Engine power
is not reduced in this mode. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on
again, momentarily depress the “ESP Control Switch”.
This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
In the Partial Off mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
355
All 4WD vehicles in Auto and 4HI Modes can also
choose the following ESP operating mode. This is
the only ESP operating mode in 4LO:
ESP Off
This mode is intended for off-road use when ESP stability
features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. This mode is entered by depressing and
holding the “ESP Control Switch” for 5 seconds when the
vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After 5
seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate
and the “ESP Off” message will appear in the odometer.
Press and release the trip odometer button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message.
In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited Slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40
mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off” mode,
described above. When the vehicle speed drops below 35
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
mph (56 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low
vehicle speeds sao that it will not interfere with off-road
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when
ESP is off. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP
On’ mode of operation.
“ESP Off” is the only operating mode for ESP in 4LO.
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4LO or the transfer
case (if equipped) is shifted from 4HI or neutral to 4LO,
the ESP system will be in this mode.
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESP Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use,
only.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
357
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING
359
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
361
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
5
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
STARTING AND OPERATING
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
363
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING
365
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire
failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that
result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
367
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases tire rolling
resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
5
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
369
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
371
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
STARTING AND OPERATING
373
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting
in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
– IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains on 1500 Ram Trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
375
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the following precautions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good
condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain
before further use.
Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of
installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage. Always use
the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if
different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Ram
4X2 trucks.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on 1500
Ram Trucks with P245/70R17 tires only.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 2500 Ram Trucks with LT245/
70R17E tires.
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the
front and rear of 4X4, 3500 Ram Trucks with Dual Rear
Wheels and LT235/80R17E tires.
NOTE: On 4X2 2500/3500 Ram Trucks, class “U” snow
chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/
80R17 size tires.
NOTE: On 4x4 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel)
Ram Trucks, class “U” snow chains are permitted on the
rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265/
70R17E.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on 4x4 Ram trucks equipped
with P265/70R17, LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, tires.
There may not be adequate clearance for the chains
and you are risking structural or body damage to
your vehicle. Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front
wheels of 2500/3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheels)
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17 LT235/
80R17 tires or 4X4 front wheels of Ram Trucks
equipped with LT265/70R17E. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking
structural or body damage to your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construction as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
377
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Dual Rear Wheels
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
379
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the ON/OFF road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the truck. For example, if the spare is used
to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be
remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL tires
will maintain proper position.
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are designed to meet all emissions regulations and
provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having an octane rating
3.7L/4.7L
of 87. The routine use of premium gasoline
Engines
is not recommended. Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu5.7L Engines facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance.The routine use
of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
381
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
5
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
life and reduce emission system performance. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,
or engine piston damage may result.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
383
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
5
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system. Also a
poorly fitted after-market cap can cause the MIL
(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
ADDING FUEL
Adding Fuel (Gas Engines)
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle long
enough to force open the restricting door.
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
385
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on, Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal fire regulations and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument
5
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off.
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
FLEXIBLE FUEL— (Fleet Vehicles Only)
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
387
• you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,
you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to the “Maintenance Procedures” section of
this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil. (See page 456 for more information.)
5
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F. In the range
of 0°F to 32°F, you may experience an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in
drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is
fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Schedule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
389
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
STARTING AND OPERATING
391
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the
following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed
both in its ⴖcurb weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded
and ready for operationⴖ condition.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include
a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
393
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axel(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
5
Weight Distributing Hitch System
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
See your dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Greater than 10,000 lbs
Gooseneck
(4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
397
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
• http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Your vehicle may require special axle lubricant.
Please refer to the fluids section of this manual.
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
399
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
5
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
401
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
403
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/OFF” feature ON when
driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive
position 2 on more severe grades.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
STARTING AND OPERATING
405
5
Blindspot Mirror
Trailer Towing Position
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
CAUTION!
Using 1500 Model vehicles for snowplow applications can cause damage to the vehicle.
Dodge Ram 1500 Models
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Ram 1500 Models for snowplow applications.
WARNING!
On 1500 Models, snowplows, winches, and other
aftermarket equipment should not be added to the
front end of your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors
may be affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or
could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner / installer obtain and
follow the recommendations contained within the current Dodge BODY BUILDER’S GUIDE. See your dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacture for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
as described earlier in this manual
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.
Before plowing
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.
407
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6.4 mm
to13 mm) above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.
Snowplow Model Prep Package Availability
For Detailed Information Visit www.dodge.com or refer
to the Current Dodge Truck Body Builders Guide.
1. The 1500 models are NOT available for snowplow
applications.
2. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
3. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
4. The snowplow prep packages are not available with
the Sport Package.
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end tow-in should be checked and
reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire
wear.
Over the Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Methods For Removing Snow
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
409
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with an overhead console module, the outside temperature display will show higher temperatures than the
outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the
underhood ambient temperature sensor by the snowplow. This is common and outside temperature display
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions. Whenever the plow is
disconnected from the vehicle, coat the exposed angling
cylinder rods with chassis lubricant. The lift cylinder
should be extended upward and chassis lubricant applied to the lift rod. The hydraulic hoses interconnect to
keep the couplers clean.
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed.
Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive Models
• Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission between forward and reverse.
NOTE: Change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) according to Maintenance Schedule ⬙B.⬙
Recreational towing 2 Wheel Drive is not allowed.
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in
severe transmission damage.
Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING
411
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
NOTE: Both the Manual Shift and Electronic Shift
transfer cases must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be
placed in P (Park) position for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be left in gear (not in neutral)
for recreational towing. Refer below for the proper transfer case Neutral shifting procedure for your vehicle.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
5. Shift transfer case lever into N (NEUTRAL).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
CAUTION!
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the
transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the
transmission into P (PARK)
10. Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
11. Shift automatic transmission into P (PARK).
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Returning to Normal Operation — Manual Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shut OFF the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
6. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
7. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
413
CAUTION!
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
the internal parts.
5
Recreational Towing Procedure — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
4 seconds.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button.
8. Start engine.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
2. Shut OFF the engine.
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
14. Apply parking brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING
15. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
16. Release parking brake.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
415
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).
Returning to Normal Operation — Electronic Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
5
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
9. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
NOTE: The transfer case can not be shifted into Neutral
(N) from the 4Auto (if equipped) position.
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met
during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
STARTING AND OPERATING
417
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
despite the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid
loss will damage internal parts.
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is displayed on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identification Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equipment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
Plate When Ordering Parts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Reinstalling The Scissors-Type Jack And Tools
(1500 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 442
䡵 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ 4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ 2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
6
420
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the
steering column as shown in the illustration.
To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button
on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard
Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
Hazard Light Warning Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights
may discharge your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
421
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger
seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for access.
Removal (2500/3500/Mega Cab)
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
6
2500/3500 Model Vehicles
422
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Removal (1500 Standard Cab/Quad Cab Vehicles)
Jack Wing Bolt
Jack Cover
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat. Lift the tab and slide the plactic cover
forward for access.
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
423
2. Position the jack and tool bag (unrolled). Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Reinstalling The Scissors-Type Jack And Tools
(1500 Models)
6
1. Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw until the jack is snug.
Turn Screw and Lug
424
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical
package (in direction of arrows), and tie to the jack using
the tie straps.
Tying Bag to Jack with Straps
Folding Flap and Rolling Bag
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
425
6
Jack and Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor and then secure to the floor pan
using the wing bolt. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack Wing Bolt
426
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
427
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
428
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
429
3. Placement of the Jack:
• For 1500 series trucks, when changing a front wheel,
place the scissors jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.
6
1500 4X2 Jacking Location
430
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1500 4X4 Jacking Location
• For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a
front wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame
rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward
as possible on the straight part of the frame.
4X2 Jacking
• Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the
wheel wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but
is not required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the
front wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack
and connect the drive tube to the extension tube.
Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as
possible with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
431
• For all trucks, when changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect
the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack
under the axle between the spring and the shock
absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear.
6
Rear Jacking Location (All)
432
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the 2500/3500 bottle jack will not lower by
turning the dial (thumb wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel on 1500/2500/3500 single
rear wheel (SRW) models. On 3500 dual rear wheel
models (DRW) the lug nuts are a two piece assembly
with a flat face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ft.
lbs. (183 N·m) torque for 1500/2500/3500 single rear
wheel (SRW) models and 145 ft. lbs. (197 N·m) for 3500
dual rear wheel models. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your dealer or at a service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
433
WARNING!
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and
wheel in the places provided.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
7. Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks. Do
not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the
spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
For 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pryoff notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
6
434
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the
hub cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
CAUTION!
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the
lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
nuts are a two piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add 2 drops
of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
435
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. Correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed.
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
6
436
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles (160
km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until
final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are
shown in the following chart.
Disc
Wheels
Type Nut Stud Size Torque
Ft. Lbs.
Cone
Flanged
9/16-18
9/16-18
120-150
130-160
Torque
Newton
Meters
160-200
190-220
437
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
1500 Standard and Quad Cab vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under
the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through
the wheel pilot hole. Secure the (flat) tire in the bed of the
truck, have the (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
6
438
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way and pushing or towing a vehicle
equipped with a manual transmission may overheat and
damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is a greater
risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or
towed. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do
not use a 24 volt power source.
439
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the automatic transmission in Park or
the manual transmission in Neutral, and turn the ignition
OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
6
440
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
441
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
6
442
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE
(automatic transmissions) and between 1st and REVERSE (manual transmissions), while applying slight
pressure to the accelerator.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the
engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of
not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
WARNING!
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
443
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle—not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles
6
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,
always use one of the following methods.
444
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The Transfer Case must be in the neutral position, and the transmission must be in Park (Automatic
Transmission), or in gear (Manual Transmission) to tow a
4WD vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on the ground. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (50
km/h) and distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more
than 15 miles (25 km) can cause severe damage to the
transmission.
If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph (50 km/h)
or more than 15 miles (25 km) the vehicle must be towed
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. It may also be towed on a flatbed or with the
front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment— 3.7L/4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
䡵 Engine Compartment— 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 458
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Spark Plug Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Emission-Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
7
446
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 474
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Half-Shaft Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Clutch Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication —
2500/3500 (4X4) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty For 3500 2-Wheel Drive And 4-Wheel
Drive Models Over 10,000 Lbs. (4 535 Kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
䡵 Fuses (Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 492
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And
Turn Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
▫ Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . 503
447
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight (CHMSL)
With Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped . . . . 507
▫ Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
▫ Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) . . . . . . 511
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 514
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
7
448
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 3.7L/4.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
449
ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 5.7L
7
450
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Vehicles equipped with California emissions controls
have a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called
OBDII. This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
451
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
7
452
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 seconds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
453
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
7
454
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Heavy Loading
455
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
• Off-road or desert operation
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
7
456
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dusty Conditions
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner, the crankcase inlet air cleaner and the
crankcase ventilation system. Make sure that these units
are clean at all times. This will tend to reduce to a
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter
the engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacture only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For trucks with 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-30 engine oil
is recommended for all operating temperatures. For
2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operating under a
gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs. or greater,
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. For all other trucks with a 5.7L engine,
operating under a gross weight rating less than 14,000
lbs. SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
operating temperatures. These engine oils improve low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
457
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
7
458
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
Spark Plug Wires
The spark plug wires should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty wires should be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the
filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced
if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule “B”.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
459
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
7
460
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
461
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Emission-Related Components
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Positive Crankcase (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plugging from deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the PCV
valve and passages with increasing mileage. Have the
PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve— do not
attempt to clean the old PCV valve! Check the ventilation hoses for indications of damage, weepage or plugging with deposits. Replace if necessary.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance Free Battery
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
7
462
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
NOTE: Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information
book for further warranty information.
463
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
7
464
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
4 x 2 Models
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are
permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require
service. However, if the seals on the ball joints are
damaged, the joints should be replaced. Serviceable
replacement ball joints are available.
Front suspension ball joints should be replaced only by a
qualified service technician using tools specially designed for this purpose. Damage to the joints and/or
suspension components may result if improper replacement procedures are used.
If seals are damaged the ball joints should be replaced to
prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.
Steering Linkage — Inspection
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent
465
leakage or contamination of the grease. Lubricate the
steering linkage regularly according to the “Maintenance
Schedule” in this manual.
Half-shaft Constant Velocity Joints
All four- wheel- drive 1500 models are equipped with
four constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
joints is not required. However, the joint boots should be
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued operation could result in failure of the joint due to water
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure.
7
466
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (4X4)
Models
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule
for your vehicle (Schedule “A” and “B”). Use Mopar威
type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), or equivalent.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
467
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help
blade performance.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
468
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type
Hanger — If Equipped
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. SLIGHT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CRACKING DUE TO WEATHERING DOES NOT ADVERSELY AFFECT PERFORMANCE. If, however, excessively deep localized cracks are present, or any part of the
exhaust system abnormally contacts the underbody hardware, the isolator and/or hanger should be replaced.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
469
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
7
470
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% recommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
471
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
472
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
473
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
7
474
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (front and rear)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
475
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
7
476
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct Fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
477
Clutch Hydraulic System
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
Clutch Linkage
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct
lubricant type.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct Fluid type. For normal service, periodic fluid level
checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for
other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected
inspect the fluid level.
7
478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level
position. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole for the Manufacturer’s C205F HD Front
Axles. The fluid level should be 5/8” (16 mm) below on
9 1/4” Manufacturer’s Rear Axles.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25” Front and 3/4”± 1/4” (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5”
Rear axles. The 11.5” Rear Axle level should be 1/4” ±
1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Limited-Slip Differentials in 1500 Model vehicles require that 4 oz. (118 ml) Mopar威 limited slip additive be
added to the gear lubricant. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type. The Mopar威
Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear
lubricant whenever a fluid change is made.
Drain and Refill
Vehicles operated in normal service do not have regularly
scheduled oil changes. If fluid has become contaminated
with water or to provide the correct viscosity grade, drain
and refill.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Ram 2500/3500 Model Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection G238 (6-Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped)
This transmission is filled with manual transmission
fluid at the factory. This fluid does not require periodic
changing. If it is necessary to add or change fluid in this
transmission refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type. This is the only lubricant
recommended for use in the Getrag 238 transmission.
479
Lubricant Selection G56 (6-Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped)
This transmission is filled with manual transmission
fluid at the factory. This fluid only requires periodic
changing if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions as defined under Maintenance Schedule ”B” in the
Maintenance Schedule section of this Owner’s Manual. If
it is necessary to add or change fluid in this transmission
refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type. This is the only lubricant recommended for
use in the G56 transmission.
Fluid Level Check – All Manual Transmissions
This fluid level can be checked by removing the fill plug.
If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/4” (6.4 mm)
below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is on
level ground, enough lubricant should be added to bring
the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
7
480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be
maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Fluid Level Check – 545RFE/42RLE
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
481
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
7
482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The fluid and filter(s) should be changed as specified in
the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8).
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
Front and rear Wheel Bearings
Front Wheel Bearings
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“purge” excess grease and the bearing will look slightly
wet. This is normal. Periodic inspection for excess play is
recommended.
483
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator’s compartment.
Rear Wheel Bearings — Manufacturer’s Axles
These bearings are normally considered permanently
lubricated. Cleaning and repacking is required only
when axle shafts are removed or in case of extreme water
or dust contamination.
Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty For 3500 2-Wheel Drive and 4-Wheel
Drive models over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating.
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the
United States are required to comply with the Federal
Government’s Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles
7
Required Maintenance for Noise Control Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every 6 months or 6,000 miles (9 600 km), whichever
comes first, to assure proper operation of the noise
control systems. In addition, inspection and service
484
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle
will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
and the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
cleaner for tightness. The gasket between the air cleaner
housing and throttle body must be intact and in good
condition. The engine air cleaner filter must also be clean
and serviced according to the instructions outlined in the
appropriate maintenance schedule.
Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
AIR CLEANER
• Removal of the air cleaner.
• Inverting the air cleaner lid.
• Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
• Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
• Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
• Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and
equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturers
control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations.
485
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturers control, caused noise
emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
7
486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the
mileage at which service was performed.
MILES
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
KILOMETERS
10 000
19 000
29 000
39 000
48 000
58 000
68 000
77 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES
KILOMETERS
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
54,000
87 000
60,000
97 000
66,000
106 000
72,000
116 000
78,000
126 000
84,000
135 000
90,000
145 000
96,000
154 000
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
487
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
7
488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
489
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
7
490
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
491
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
7
492
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)
An integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Integrated Power Module Location
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
1
20 Amp
Yellow
2
20 Amp
Yellow
3
4
5
6
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Power Outlet Console
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Door
Locks/Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Spare
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
7
15 Amp
Blue
8
9
10
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
5 Amp
Orange
493
Description
Reverse Lockout Solenoid Battery (SRT-10
Only)
Heated Mirrors
Off Road Module
Power
Trx-Off Rd Pkg Sen
(Gas Engine Only)
Spare
Power Sunroof
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/
VIST Fan/Wastegate
7
494
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
11
20 Amp
Yellow
12
30 Amp
Pink
13
25 Amp
Natural
14
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD)-Cabin Compartment Node
(CCN)/Radio/Under
Hood Lamp/Wireless
Control Module
(WCM)/Satellite Digital Audio Receiver
(SDARS)/Hands Free
Module (HFM)
Electric Brake
Power-Battery
RWAL/ABS Module
Feed
Park Lamps Left
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
15
20 Amp
Yellow
16
15 Amp
Blue
17
15 Amp
Blue
18
40 Amp
Green
19
30 Amp
Pink
20
10 Amp
Red
21
10 Amp
Red
22
2 Amp
Gray
Description
Trailer Park Lamps
Park Lamps Right
Spare
ABS Pump
Trailer Tow
Occupant Restraints
Controller (ORC) 2
Occupant Restraints
Controller (ORC) Preset Carrier
IGN Switch Feed
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
23
10 Amp
Red
24
20 Amp
Blue
25
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
26
27
28
40 Amp
Green
Description
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Wireless
Control Module
(WCM)/HVC
Subwoofer Amplifier
(SRT-10 Only)
Power Mirror
Brake Switch/Center
High Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
Power Seats
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
29
10 Amp
Red
30
15 Amp
Blue
31
10 Amp
Red
32
10 Amp
Red
33
34
10 Amp
Red
Power Run/StartNCC/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
ABS/RWAL
35
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
495
Description
Switches/EC Mirror/
Smart Bar
Spare
PCM/Transfer Case
Brake
HVAC/Ajustable
Pedals/Heated Seats
Switch LED/Exhaust
Brake
Power-IGN Run Misc
Spare
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Illumination
7
496
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
36
25 Amp
Natural
37
15 Amp
Blue
38
20 Amp
Yellow
39
10 Amp
Red
40
20 Amp
Yellow
41
25 Amp
Natural
42
30 Amp
Pink
Description
Audio_Amplifier
Spare
Power Outlet IP
Sunroof/Seatbelt Tensioner
Cigar Lighter
Spare
Diesel PCM (Diesel
Only)
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Integrated Power Module, located in the
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block.
• The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in
the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the
battery drain.
• As an alternative to the above steps you may, disconnect the negative cables from both batteries.
497
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until
fully seated, the gages in the Instrument Cluster will do
a full sweep, when the ignition key is cycled to RUN. This
is a normal condition.
7
498
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb No.
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL
Headlamp (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Side Marker, Park & Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK
Rear License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Tail & Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Cab Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights (3) . . . . . . . . . 168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
499
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
CAUTION!
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass
with your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the two (2) bolts from the front of the headlight housing.
Front Headlight Housing Bolts
7
500
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the plug from the inner fender well and
remove the nut through the access hole.
Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access
Inner Fender Plug
4. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to
disconnect the electrical connectors.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
501
NOTE: For easier removal, pull the headlight assembly
straight forward, applying the greatest amount of force to
the outer edge of the headlight assembly.
Bulb Removal
5. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of
the headlight halogen bulb.
Headlight Removal
6. Twist connector on the side marker/turn signal/park
light bulb 1⁄4 turn and remove connector and bulb from
housing.
7
502
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen
bulb in housing.
8. Twist the headlight halogen bulb 1⁄4 turn and remove
headlight bulb from the housing.
9. Replace headlight or side marker/turn signal/park
light bulb. Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb.
10. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
Fog Lights
1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector
counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn and remove connector and bulb
from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.
503
Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup Lights
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
7
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
Removing the Two (2) Screws
504
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a
quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If
not pulled straight, locators may be damaged.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the housing.
Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing
Pulling Housing From Body
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
505
5. Reverse Procedure to install bulb and housing. Place
the two raised blocks passed the body.
7
Pulling Bulb From Socket
Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body
506
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stoplight (CHMSL) With
Cargo Light
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
3. Turn desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
507
Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the light.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
7
508
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the light
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
509
Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Remove the two screws and housing and access the
bulb sockets from the rear.
7
510
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn socket 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
Rear Light Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheel) – If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access
to the bulb sockets.
3. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
2. Turn the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise to access
the bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
1. Push rearward on the side marker light assembly.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
Side Marker Lights (Dual Rear Wheels)
511
3. Turn socket 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise and remove from
assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
7
512
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.7L/4.7L
5.7L
1500 Shortbed Models
1500 Longbed Models
1500 Shortbed Models
2500 Shortbed Models
2500 Longbed Models
3500 Shortbed Models
3500 Longbed Models
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L Engine V-6 (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
4.7L Engine V-8 (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
26
35
34
34
35
34
35
gal.
gal.
gal.
gal.
gal.
gal.
gal.
98L
132L
128L
128L
132L
128L
132L
5.0 qts.
6.0 qts.
4.7L
5.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5.7L Engine V-8 (SAE 5W-20, API Certified). For trucks
operating under a gross combined weight rating less
than 14,000 lbs.
5.7L Engine V-8 (SAE 5W-30, API Certified). For 2500/
3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight
rating greater than 14,000 lbs.
Cooling System
3.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula) or equivalent.
4.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula) or equivalent.
5.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula) or equivalent.
U.S.
Metric
7.0 qts.
6.6L
7.0 qts.
6.6L
17 qts.
16L
17 qts.
16L
18.7 qts.
17.7L
513
7
514
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
3.7/4.7L Engine Oil
Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
5.7L Engine Oil (For trucks operat- Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
ing under a gross combined
weight rating less than 14,000 lbs.)
5.7L Engine Oil (For 2500/3500
Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
trucks operating under a gross
combined weight rating greater
than 14,000 lbs.)
Engine Oil Filter
Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
Fuel Selection (all except 5.7L)
87 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method
Fuel Selection (5.7L)
89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method, Mid-Grade Preferred (87 Octane acceptable)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
515
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case
Only
Manaul Transmission Fluid (G238)
Manual Transmission Fluid (G-56)
Clutch Linkage
1500 Model Front Axle (4X4)
1500 Model Rear Axle
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 PN 05179014AA, NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent.
GL-5 SAE 75W-90 (MS-9763) or equivalent.
Mopar威 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip
Rear Axles on 1500 Models Require the addition of 118 ml (4 oz.) Mopar威
Limited Slip Additive or equivalent.
2500/3500 Model Front and Rear Axle Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90 or equivalent. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch
Rear Axles DO NOT REQUIRE a limited slip additive.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 518
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
䡵 Maintenance Schedules – Gas Engines . . . . . . . . 518
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
518
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times
or mileages specified to assure the continued proper
functioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
H areas and very short trip driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES – GAS ENGINES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under one or more of the following conditions that are
listed below and at the beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Snowplowing.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Heavy Loading.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
519 M
A
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions I
N
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
T
E
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not N
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched- A
N
ule ⬙B⬙.
C
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- E
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the S
C
interval that occurs first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 520 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I At Each Stop for Fuel
N
T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
E
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
N
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuA
N
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
C
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir,
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Lubricate Drivetrain/Steering/Suspension Grease Fittings (if equipped)
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the CV joints/U— joints (if equipped) and
front suspension components.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
SCHEDULE “B”
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.
• Snowplowing.
• Heavy Loading.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
521 M
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
S
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
NOTE: If none of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 522 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
A or 3 months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
3,000
(5 000)
6,000
(10 000)
9,000
(14 000)
12,000
(19 000)
15,000
(24 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
or 3 months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
523 M
18,000
(29 000)
21,000
(34 000)
24,000
(39 000)
27,000
(43 000)
30,000
(48 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 524 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
A or 3 months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
33,000
(53 000)
36,000
(58 000)
39,000
(63 000)
42,000
(68 000)
45,000
(72 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
or 3 months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Flush and replace engine coolant.
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Change 6-spd manual transmission fluid 2500/3500 models only.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
525 M
48,000
(77 000)
51,000
(82 000)
54,000
(87 000)
57,000
(92 000)
60,000
(97 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 526 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
A or 3 months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change
main sump filter*.
63,000
(101 000)
66,000
(106 000)
69,000
(111 000)
72,000
(116 000)
75,000
(121 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
or 3 months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).****
Inspect Transfer Case Fluid, add if necessary.
78,000
(126 000)
81,000
(130 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
527 M
84,000
87,000
90,000
(135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 528 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
A or 3 months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60
months.
Inspect brake linings.
93,000
(150 000)
96,000
(154 000)
99,000
(159 000)
102,000
(164 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval
shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Change 6-spd manual transmission fluid 2500/
3500 models only.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
105,000
(169 000)
108,000
111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(174 000) (179 000) (183 000) (188 000) (193 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
529 M
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 530 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
A Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if reN
C quired (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
E Flush and replace engine coolant if not done at
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
102,000 miles (170 000 km).
Inspect automatic transmission fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
105,000
(169 000)
X
108,000
111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(174 000) (179 000) (183 000) (188 000) (193 000)
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
123,000
(Kilometers)
(198 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interX
val shown or 3 months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
X
4X4).
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4)
models only.
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
126,000
(203 000)
531 M
129,000
132,000
135,000
138,000
(208 000) (212 000) (217 000) (222 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 532 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter at interval shown
A or 3 months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
Change front and rear axle fluid (4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
141,000
(227 000)
144,000
(232 000)
147,000
(237 000)
150,000
(241 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid and change
main sump and spin-on cooler return filter (if equipped)*.
Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at
120,000 miles (193 000 km).
* This applies only if the vehicle is used for frequent
trailer towing, snowplowing, fleet vehicle or commercial
service.
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
141,000
(227 000)
144,000
(232 000)
147,000
(237 000)
533 M
150,000
(241 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
**** This maintenance is not required if the belt was S
previously replaced.
C
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 534 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I Schedule “A”
N
T Miles
E
N (Kilometers)
A [Months]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(29 000)
[18]
X
X
24,000
(39 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
36,000
(58 000)
[36]
X
X
42,000
(68 000)
[42]
X
X
X
X
48,000
54,000
(77 000) (87 000)
[48]
[54]
X
X
X
X
X
60,000
(97 00)
[60]
X
X
66,000
(106 000)
[66]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
535 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
X
M 536 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
age.
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models
only.
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4).
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary. **
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
72,000
(116 000)
[72]
X
X
78,000
(126 000)
[78]
X
X
84,000
(135 000)
[84]
X
X
90,000
(145 000)
[90]
X
X
96,000
(154 000)
[96]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500, 4X4).
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months.
Flush and replace engine coolant if not replaced at 102,00
miles (164 000 km/h).
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required (3.7L/
4.7L/5.7L).****
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV Valve, replace as necessary. **
102,000
(164 000)
[102]
X
X
X
108,000
(174 000)
[108]
X
X
X
114,000
(183 000)
[114]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
120,000
(193 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
537 M
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 538 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
stowage.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4).
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (2500/3500,
4X4).
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at
120,000 miles (193 000 km).
Lubricate outer tie rod ends 2500/3500 (4X4) models only.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).****
126,000
(203 000)
[126]
X
X
132,000
(212 000)
[132]
X
X
138,000
(222 000)
[138]
X
X
144,000
(232 000)
[144]
X
X
150,000
(241 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV Valve, replace as necessary. **
126,000
(203 000)
[126]
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
**** This maintenance is not required if the belt was
previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
132,000
(212 000)
[132]
138,000
(222 000)
[138]
144,000
(232 000)
[144]
539 M
150,000
(241 000)
[150]
X
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 545
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
9
542
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
543
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
544
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
545
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
546
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
547
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
9
548
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
550
INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . 459,484
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,464
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,463
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 289
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367,375
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,54,86,92
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,219,228
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,92
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,230
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 470,471,512
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,344
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,342
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,230
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Automatic Transmission
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,515
Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477,515
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,73
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476,515
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,475
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,344
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations, New
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
......
Vehicle
......
......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX
551
.
.
.
.
232
112
499
498
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 217,218,383
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 281
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,246,260
10
552
INDEX
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,83
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 203,204
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . 231
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,99,100
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . 64,68,103,107
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,67,100,106
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,240,248,262,275
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Clutch Linkage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,184
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 471
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469,472
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 470,512,514
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
INDEX
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,97
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,209
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,285,287
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
553
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,434
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 275
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,209
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 175
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 234,352
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . 321,329
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
10
554
INDEX
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 518
Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,449
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,449
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,512,514
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,512
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,97
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,218,383,468
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218,468
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,484
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457,514
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,437
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,387
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
INDEX
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 514
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,233,502
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
555
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,514
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,512
System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,450
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10
556
INDEX
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,314
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
126
420
151
499
490
170
170
168
170
166
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,209
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 170
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 186
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cables (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . 458
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,99,100
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,227
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,427
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
557
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,83
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,73
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . 64,103
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,220
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,96,228
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,342
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498,499
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . 231
10
558
INDEX
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dual Wheel Assembly Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . 234,353
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,233,502
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,228
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,179
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498,499
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,227,499,503
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 227
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,478
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,103
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
INDEX
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . . . 451
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,314,479
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479,515
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
559
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,404
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452,545
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Noise Control
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Tampering Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483,484
Noise Emission Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,72
Occupant Restraints
(1500 Standard and Quad Cab Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Occupant Restraints (2500/3500/Mega Cab Only) . . 72
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
10
560
INDEX
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,235
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,235
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,514
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457,514
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,512
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,512
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,451
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,180
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 180
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 546
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . .
Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 338
54,92
. 170
. 174
. 126
. 126
. 213
. 362
. 461
. 492
INDEX
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 196
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,154
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,464
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,85
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,83
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 188,192
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,192
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 470,471
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
561
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,246,260
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,246,260
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158
Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,97
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . 411,413
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 412,415
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,84
10
562
INDEX
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 280
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,67,99,106
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 219
. 219
. 545
. 358
. 217
. 275
. 279
. 518
. 491
44,84
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,34,72,73,219
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 42,81
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,85
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,72,99,111
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,85
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,73
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,83
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,149
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,111
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,154
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,158
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,151
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,230
INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 470,514
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,240,248,262,275
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,314
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411,413
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,415
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,81
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,73
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
563
Sliding Rear Window
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,371
Spark Plug Wires (Ignition Cables/Wires) . . . . . . 458
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Steering
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
10
564
INDEX
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,464
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . 203,204
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 375
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tachometer . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . .
Tether Anchor, Child
Tilt Steering Column
.......
.......
Restraint
......
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
. . . . . . . . 64,68,103,107
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 362,375
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219,366,547
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,434
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,363
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
INDEX
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,366
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
565
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,345
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,404
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,329
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,480
10
566
INDEX
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479,480
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,312,314,479
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306,315
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 186
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,235
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,227,499,503
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone)
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
126
492
547
186
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,389
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 227
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,467
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,436
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,195
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
INDEX
567
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,287
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,172,467
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,467
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Wiring, Ignition (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . 458
10
NOTES
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising